Add test that exercises the inferior being killed while stopped under GDB
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
889c2a67
L
1149@item noextern-protected-data
1150Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155i386 and x86-64.
1156
cd6d6c15
NC
1157@end table
1158
ece2d90e 1159Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1160
1161@kindex -(
1162@cindex groups of archives
1163@item -( @var{archives} -)
1164@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175resolved.
1176
1177Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179more archives.
1180
69da35b5
NC
1181@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1186recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1187and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1192
4a43e768
AM
1193@kindex --as-needed
1194@kindex --no-as-needed
1195@item --as-needed
1196@itemx --no-as-needed
1197This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1198on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1199the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1201needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1202emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1204the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1206Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1210
e56f61be
L
1211@kindex --add-needed
1212@kindex --no-add-needed
1213@item --add-needed
1214@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1215These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1219
252b5132
RH
1220@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221@item -assert @var{keyword}
1222This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224@kindex -Bdynamic
1225@kindex -dy
1226@kindex -call_shared
1227@item -Bdynamic
1228@itemx -dy
1229@itemx -call_shared
1230Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1235@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1236
a1ab1d2a
UD
1237@kindex -Bgroup
1238@item -Bgroup
1239Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1242@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1244
252b5132
RH
1245@kindex -Bstatic
1246@kindex -dn
1247@kindex -non_shared
1248@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1249@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1250@itemx -dn
1251@itemx -non_shared
1252@itemx -static
1253Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1257library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1258option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1262libraries.
252b5132
RH
1263
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic
1265@item -Bsymbolic
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
40b36307
L
1272@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1275symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1276This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277libraries.
1278
55255dae
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287which support shared libraries.
1288
1289The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
40b36307
L
1292@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293@item --dynamic-list-data
1294Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
0b8a70d9
L
1301@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
252b5132
RH
1305@kindex --check-sections
1306@kindex --no-check-sections
1307@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1308@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1309Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1310been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1311perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1314restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1315Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317option.
252b5132 1318
ddbb8a31
NC
1319@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1323This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1324by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1325command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1326output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1327input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1328specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1329follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1331
1332This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1333libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1339symbols.
1340
252b5132
RH
1341@cindex cross reference table
1342@kindex --cref
1343@item --cref
1344Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1352definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354symbol are listed.
252b5132 1355
4818e05f
AM
1356@cindex common allocation
1357@kindex --no-define-common
1358@item --no-define-common
1359This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
252b5132 1374@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1375@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1377Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1384using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1387
1388@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1389@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1390@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1391@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1392@itemx --no-demangle
1393These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1397mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1400demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1402
1403@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1404@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1405@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406@item -I@var{file}
1407@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1408Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411doing.
1412
7ce691ae 1413@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1414@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1415@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1416@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1419
252b5132
RH
1420@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421@item --force-exe-suffix
1422Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431@kindex --gc-sections
1432@kindex --no-gc-sections
1433@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1434@item --gc-sections
1435@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1436Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1437targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1438performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1439@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1440collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1441implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1442
d5465ba2
AM
1443@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1444examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1445symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1446command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1447referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1448libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1449referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1450the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1451relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1452
ac69cbc6 1453This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1454@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1455specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1456a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1457
c17d87de
NC
1458@kindex --print-gc-sections
1459@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1460@cindex garbage collection
1461@item --print-gc-sections
1462@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1463List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1464printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1465collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1466default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1467be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1468line.
1469
30824704
RM
1470@kindex --print-output-format
1471@cindex output format
1472@item --print-output-format
1473Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1474other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1475in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1476
3604cb1f
TG
1477@kindex --print-memory-usage
1478@cindex memory usage
1479@item --print-memory-usage
1480Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1481the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1482quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1483headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1484parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1485
1486@smallexample
1487Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1488 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1489 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1490@end smallexample
1491
252b5132
RH
1492@cindex help
1493@cindex usage
1494@kindex --help
1495@item --help
1496Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1497
ea20a7da
CC
1498@kindex --target-help
1499@item --target-help
1500Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1501
2509a395
SL
1502@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1503@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1504Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1505@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1506
1507@cindex memory usage
1508@kindex --no-keep-memory
1509@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1510@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1511symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1512instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1513necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1514while linking a large executable.
1515
1516@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1517@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1518@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1519@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1520Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1521is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1522The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1523behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1524libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1525
aa713662
L
1526@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1527@kindex -z muldefs
1528@item --allow-multiple-definition
1529@itemx -z muldefs
1530Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1531report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1532first definition will be used.
1533
b79e8c78 1534@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1535@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1536@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1537@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1538Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1539This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1540determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1541shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1542how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1543
903249d7
NC
1544The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1545referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1546an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1547a shared library.
1548
1549The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1550libraries specified at link time are that:
1551
1552@itemize @bullet
1553@item
1554A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1555that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1556resolvable at load time.
1557@item
1558There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1559symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1560
1561The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1562select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1563architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1564appropriate memset function.
1565@end itemize
b79e8c78 1566
31941635
L
1567@kindex --no-undefined-version
1568@item --no-undefined-version
1569Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1570it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1571will be issued instead.
1572
3e3b46e5
PB
1573@kindex --default-symver
1574@item --default-symver
1575Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1576exported symbols.
1577
1578@kindex --default-imported-symver
1579@item --default-imported-symver
1580Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1581imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1582
252b5132
RH
1583@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1584@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1585Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1586files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1587been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1588This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1589errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1590have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1591inappropriate.
1592
fe7929ce
AM
1593@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1594@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1595Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1596library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1597
252b5132
RH
1598@kindex --no-whole-archive
1599@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1600Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1601archive files.
1602
1603@cindex output file after errors
1604@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1605@item --noinhibit-exec
1606Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1607Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1608errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1609when it issues any error whatsoever.
1610
0a9c1c8e
CD
1611@kindex -nostdlib
1612@item -nostdlib
1613Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1614command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1615(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1616
252b5132 1617@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1618@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1619@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1620@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1621file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1622@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1623object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1624object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1625should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1626usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1627name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1628list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1629command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1630this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1631@end ifclear
1632
36af4a4e
JJ
1633@kindex -pie
1634@kindex --pic-executable
1635@item -pie
1636@itemx --pic-executable
1637@cindex position independent executables
1638Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1639ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1640libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1641address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1642normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1643defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1644
252b5132
RH
1645@kindex -qmagic
1646@item -qmagic
1647This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1648
1649@kindex -Qy
1650@item -Qy
1651This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1652
1653@kindex --relax
1654@cindex synthesizing linker
1655@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1656@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1657@item --relax
28d5f677 1658@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1659An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1660@ifset GENERIC
1661This option is only supported on a few targets.
1662@end ifset
1663@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1664@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1665@end ifset
1666@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1667@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1668@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1669@ifset XTENSA
1670@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1671@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1672@ifset M68HC11
1673@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1674@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1675@ifset NIOSII
1676@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1677@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1678@ifset POWERPC
1679@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1680@end ifset
252b5132 1681
28d5f677
NC
1682On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1683global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1684addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1685synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1686instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1687
1688On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1689debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1690@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1691This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1692family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1693@end ifset
1694
1695@ifset GENERIC
1696On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1697but ignored.
1698@end ifset
1699
28d5f677
NC
1700On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1701@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1702
252b5132
RH
1703@cindex retaining specified symbols
1704@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1705@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1706@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1707@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1708Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1709discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1710symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1711@ifset GENERIC
1712(such as VxWorks)
1713@end ifset
1714where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1715run-time memory.
1716
1717@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1718or symbols needed for relocations.
1719
1720You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1721line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1722
1723@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1724@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1725@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1726@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1727Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1728linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1729arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1730them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1731also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1732objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1733@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1734ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1735@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1736
ff5dcc92 1737The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1738SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1739@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1740runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1741options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1742gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1743file systems.
252b5132 1744
ff5dcc92 1745For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1746followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1747the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1748@end ifset
1749
1750@ifset GENERIC
1751@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1753@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1754When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1755happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1756of the input files.
1757
1758When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1759non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1760shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1761explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1762specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1763@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1764either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1765appearing multiple times.
1766
28c309a2
NC
1767This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1768that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1769is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1770runtime linker would do.
1771
252b5132 1772The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1773libraries:
252b5132
RH
1774@enumerate
1775@item
ff5dcc92 1776Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1777@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1778Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1779between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1780specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1781used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1782at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1783by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1784the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1785@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1786On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1787@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1788environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1789@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1790On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1791directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1792@item
a1b8d843 1793For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1794variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1795@item
ec4eb78a
L
1796For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1797@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1798libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1799@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1800@item
252b5132
RH
1801The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1802@item
1803For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1804exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1805@end enumerate
1806
1807If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1808warning and continue with the link.
1809@end ifset
1810
1811@kindex -shared
1812@kindex -Bshareable
1813@item -shared
1814@itemx -Bshareable
1815@cindex shared libraries
1816Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1817and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1818shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1819undefined symbols in the link.
1820
252b5132 1821@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1822@item --sort-common
1823@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1824@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1825This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1826ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1827sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1828eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1829between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1830specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1831
2509a395
SL
1832@kindex --sort-section=name
1833@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1834This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1835patterns in the linker script.
1836
2509a395
SL
1837@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1838@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1839This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1840patterns in the linker script.
1841
252b5132 1842@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1843@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1844Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1845each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1846size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1847
1848@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1849@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1850Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1851output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1852This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1853certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1854cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1855that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1856support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1857input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1858more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1859many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1860
1861@kindex --stats
1862@item --stats
1863Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1864as execution time and memory usage.
1865
2509a395 1866@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1867@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1868Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1869configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1870that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1871
252b5132
RH
1872@kindex --traditional-format
1873@cindex traditional format
1874@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1875For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1876the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1877use the traditional format instead.
1878
1879@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1880For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1881symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1882full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1883@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1884trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1885combine duplicate entries.
1886
2509a395
SL
1887@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1888@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1889Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1890address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1891times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1892line.
1893@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1894for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1895@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1896should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1897sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1898
2509a395
SL
1899@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1900@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1901@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1902@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1903@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1904@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1905@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1906Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1907@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1908
2509a395
SL
1909@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1910@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1911@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1912When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1913byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1914
9d5777a3
RM
1915@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1916@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1917@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1918When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1919the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1920text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1921
0d705e9f
AM
1922@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1923@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1924@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1925When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1926model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1927
560e09e9
NC
1928@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1929@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1930Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1931values for @samp{method}:
1932
1933@table @samp
1934@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1935Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1936
1937@item report-all
da8bce14 1938Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1939
1940@item ignore-in-object-files
1941Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1942ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1943
1944@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1945Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1946ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1947when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1948libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1949command line.
1950@end table
1951
1952The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1953by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1954
1955Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1956unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1957can change this to a warning.
1958
1715a13c
L
1959@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1960@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1961@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1962@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1963Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1964supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1965the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1966argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1967
1968@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1969@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1970@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1971Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1972used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1973about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1974is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1975see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1976use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1977symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1978@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1979
7ce691ae 1980@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1981@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1982@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-common
1984Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1985a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1986but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1987you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1988Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1989warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1990
1991There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1992
1993@table @samp
1994@item int i = 1;
1995A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1996file.
1997
1998@item extern int i;
1999An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2000There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2001variable somewhere.
2002
2003@item int i;
2004A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2005variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2006The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2007single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2008size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2009a definition of the same variable.
2010@end table
2011
2012The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2013Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2014just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2015encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2016a common symbol.
2017
2018@enumerate
2019@item
2020Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2021definition for the symbol.
2022@smallexample
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by definition
2025@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2026@end smallexample
2027
2028@item
2029Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2030the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2031except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2032@smallexample
2033@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding common
2035@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2036@end smallexample
2037
2038@item
2039Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2040@smallexample
2041@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2042 of `@var{symbol}'
2043@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2044@end smallexample
2045
2046@item
2047Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2048@smallexample
2049@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overridden by larger common
2051@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2052@end smallexample
2053
2054@item
2055Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2056the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2057encountered in a different order.
2058@smallexample
2059@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2060 overriding smaller common
2061@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2062@end smallexample
2063@end enumerate
2064
2065@kindex --warn-constructors
2066@item --warn-constructors
2067Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2068object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2069detect the use of global constructors.
2070
2071@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2072@item --warn-multiple-gp
2073Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2074This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2075Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2076section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2077of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2078base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2079base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2080bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2081large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2082values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2083option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2084
2085@kindex --warn-once
2086@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2087@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2088@item --warn-once
2089Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2090which refers to it.
2091
3ea60775
NC
2092@kindex --warn-orphan
2093@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2094@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2095@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2096@item --warn-orphan
2097The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2098warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2099output file. @xref{Orphan Sections} The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2100option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2101sections.
2102
252b5132
RH
2103@kindex --warn-section-align
2104@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2105@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2106@item --warn-section-align
2107Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2108alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2109The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2110is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2111the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2112
8fdd7217
NC
2113@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2114@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2115Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2116
a0c402a5
L
2117@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2118@item --warn-alternate-em
2119Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2120
560e09e9
NC
2121@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2122@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2123If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2124@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2125This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2126
2127@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2128@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2129This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2130it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2131
252b5132
RH
2132@kindex --whole-archive
2133@cindex including an entire archive
2134@item --whole-archive
2135For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2136@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2137in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2138files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2139library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2140library. This option may be used more than once.
2141
7ec229ce 2142Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2143about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2144Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2145list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2146your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2147
2509a395
SL
2148@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2149@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2150Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2151@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2152undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2153@var{symbol}.
2154
2155This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2156wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2157wishes to call the system function, it should call
2158@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2159
2160Here is a trivial example:
2161
2162@smallexample
2163void *
cc2f008e 2164__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2165@{
cc2f008e 2166 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2167 return __real_malloc (c);
2168@}
2169@end smallexample
2170
ff5dcc92 2171If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2172all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2173instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2174call the real @code{malloc} function.
2175
2176You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2177links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2178you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2179file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2180call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2181
6aa29e7b
JJ
2182@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2183@item --eh-frame-hdr
2184Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2185@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2186
e41b3a13
JJ
2187@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2188@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2189Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2190generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2191if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2192
6c1439be
L
2193@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2194@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2195@item --enable-new-dtags
2196@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2197This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2198systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2199@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2200and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2201If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2202created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2203those options are only available for ELF systems.
2204
2d643429 2205@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2206@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2207Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2208close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2209time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2210increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2211value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2212
fdc90cb4
JJ
2213@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2214@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2215Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2216@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2217new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2218the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2219hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2220
0ce398f1
L
2221@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2222@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2223@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2224@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2225@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2226@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2227@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2228@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2229On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2230compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2231compress DWARF debug sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2232and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compress DWARF debug
2233sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2234instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2235compresses DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2236
35835446
JR
2237@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2238@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2239This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2240linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2241for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2242about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2243
4f9c04f7 2244Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22451021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2246run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2247has been used.
2248
2249The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2250enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2251
c0065db7
RM
2252@kindex --build-id
2253@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2254@item --build-id
2255@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2256Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2257or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2258unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2259@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2260@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2261@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2262the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2263string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2264@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2265is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2266
2267The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2268that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2269unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2270to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2271file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2272string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2273
2274Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2275@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2276@end table
2277
0285c67d
NC
2278@c man end
2279
36f63dca 2280@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2281
0285c67d
NC
2282@c man begin OPTIONS
2283
ff5dcc92 2284The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2285the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2286normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2287use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2288@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2289like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2290symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2291object file).
2292
2293In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2294support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2295PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2296values by either a space or an equals sign.
2297
ff5dcc92 2298@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2299
2300@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2301@item --add-stdcall-alias
2302If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2303as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2304[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2305
2306@kindex --base-file
2307@item --base-file @var{file}
2308Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2309addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2310@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2311[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2312
2313@kindex --dll
2314@item --dll
2315Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2316@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2317file.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2319
88183869
DK
2320@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2321@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2322@item --enable-long-section-names
2323@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2324The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2325the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2326for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2327fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2328to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2329allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2330disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2331generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2332as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2333with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2334GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2335information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2336option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2337section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2338when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2339image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2340[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2341
252b5132
RH
2342@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2343@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2344@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2345@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2346If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2347do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2348only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2349resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2350undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2351@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2352to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2353warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2354import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2355to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2356feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2357@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2358mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2360
522f09cd
KT
2361@kindex --leading-underscore
2362@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2363@item --leading-underscore
2364@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2365For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2366in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2367disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2368
252b5132
RH
2369@cindex DLLs, creating
2370@kindex --export-all-symbols
2371@item --export-all-symbols
2372If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2373be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2374otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2375explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2376attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2377option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2378@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2379@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2380exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2381re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2382such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2383@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2384@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2385Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2386not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2387extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2388(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2389These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2390@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2391@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2392@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2393@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2395
2396@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2397@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2398Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2399exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2400[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2401
2927aaca
NC
2402@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2403@item --exclude-all-symbols
2404Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2406
252b5132
RH
2407@kindex --file-alignment
2408@item --file-alignment
2409Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2410file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2411512.
bb10df36 2412[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2413
2414@cindex heap size
2415@kindex --heap
2416@item --heap @var{reserve}
2417@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2418Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2419to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2420committed.
bb10df36 2421[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2422
2423@cindex image base
2424@kindex --image-base
2425@item --image-base @var{value}
2426Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2427the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2428is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2429your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2430other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2431for dlls.
bb10df36 2432[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2433
2434@kindex --kill-at
2435@item --kill-at
2436If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2437symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2439
26d2d8a2
BF
2440@kindex --large-address-aware
2441@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2442If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2443header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2444greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2445or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2446section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2447[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2448
f69a2f97
NC
2449@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2450@item --disable-large-address-aware
2451Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2452This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2453driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2454addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2455[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2456
252b5132
RH
2457@kindex --major-image-version
2458@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2459Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2460[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2461
2462@kindex --major-os-version
2463@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2464Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2465[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2466
2467@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2468@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2469Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2470[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2471
2472@kindex --minor-image-version
2473@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2474Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2475[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2476
2477@kindex --minor-os-version
2478@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2479Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2480[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2481
2482@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2483@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2484Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2485[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2486
2487@cindex DEF files, creating
2488@cindex DLLs, creating
2489@kindex --output-def
2490@item --output-def @var{file}
2491The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2492file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2493(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2494library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2495automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2496[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2497
b044cda1
CW
2498@cindex DLLs, creating
2499@kindex --out-implib
2500@item --out-implib @var{file}
2501The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2502import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2503import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2504may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2505makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2506creation step.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2508
2509@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2510@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2511@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2512Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2513@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2514By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2515for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2516execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2518
2519@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2520@item --disable-auto-image-base
2521Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2522user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2523default.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2525
2526@cindex DLLs, linking to
2527@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2528@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2529When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2530search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2531@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2532between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2533uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2534@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2535[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2536
2537@kindex --enable-auto-import
2538@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2539Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2540DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2541building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2542'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2543to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2544specification published by Microsoft.
2545
e2a83dd0
NC
2546Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2547data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2548placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2549around a problem with consts that is described here:
2550http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2551
4d8907ac
DS
2552Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2553see this message:
0d888aac 2554
ece2d90e 2555"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2556documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2557
ece2d90e
NC
2558This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2559ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2560allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2561fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2562constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2563multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2564this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2565of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2566the warning, and exit.
2567
2568There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2569data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2570
2fa9fc65
NC
2571One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2572of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2573this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2574
c0065db7
RM
2575A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2576that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2577there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2578a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2579
2580@example
2581extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2582extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2583 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2584@end example
2585
2586or
2587
2588@example
2589extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2590extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2591 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2592@end example
2593
c0065db7 2594For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2595is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2596
2597@example
2598extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2599extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2600 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2601@end example
2602
c406afaf
NC
2603or
2604
2605@example
2606extern long long extern_ll;
2607extern_ll -->
2608 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2609@end example
2610
2fa9fc65 2611A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2612'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2613@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2614requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2615building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2616merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2617between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2618constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2619
2620Original:
2621@example
2622--foo.h
2623extern int arr[];
2624--foo.c
2625#include "foo.h"
2626void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2627 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2628@}
2629@end example
2630
2631Solution 1:
2632@example
2633--foo.h
2634extern int arr[];
2635--foo.c
2636#include "foo.h"
2637void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2638 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2639 volatile int *parr = arr;
2640 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2641@}
2642@end example
2643
2644Solution 2:
2645@example
2646--foo.h
2647/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2648#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2649 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2650#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2651#else
2652#define FOO_IMPORT
2653#endif
2654extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2655--foo.c
2656#include "foo.h"
2657void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2658 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2659@}
2660@end example
2661
c0065db7 2662A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2663library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2664for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2665functions).
bb10df36 2666[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2667
2668@kindex --disable-auto-import
2669@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2670Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2671@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2673
2fa9fc65
NC
2674@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2675@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2676If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2677that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2678a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2679environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2680[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2681
2682@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2683@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2684Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2685DLLs.
bb10df36 2686[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2687
b044cda1
CW
2688@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2689@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2690Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2692
252b5132
RH
2693@kindex --section-alignment
2694@item --section-alignment
2695Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2696addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2697[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2698
2699@cindex stack size
2700@kindex --stack
2701@item --stack @var{reserve}
2702@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2703Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2704to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2705committed.
bb10df36 2706[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2707
2708@kindex --subsystem
2709@item --subsystem @var{which}
2710@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2711@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2712Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2713legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2714@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2715the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2716@var{which}.
bb10df36 2717[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2718
2f563b51
DK
2719The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2720of the PE file header:
2721[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2722
2d5c3743
NC
2723@kindex --high-entropy-va
2724@item --high-entropy-va
2725Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2726(ASLR).
2727
2f563b51
DK
2728@kindex --dynamicbase
2729@item --dynamicbase
2730The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2731randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2732Vista for i386 PE targets.
2733
2734@kindex --forceinteg
2735@item --forceinteg
2736Code integrity checks are enforced.
2737
2738@kindex --nxcompat
2739@item --nxcompat
2740The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2741This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2742
2743@kindex --no-isolation
2744@item --no-isolation
2745Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2746
2747@kindex --no-seh
2748@item --no-seh
2749The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2750this image.
2751
2752@kindex --no-bind
2753@item --no-bind
2754Do not bind this image.
2755
2756@kindex --wdmdriver
2757@item --wdmdriver
2758The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2759
2f563b51
DK
2760@kindex --tsaware
2761@item --tsaware
2762The image is Terminal Server aware.
2763
0cb112f7
CF
2764@kindex --insert-timestamp
2765@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2766@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2767Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2768as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2769other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2770will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2771same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2772can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2773that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2774identically.
252b5132
RH
2775@end table
2776
0285c67d
NC
2777@c man end
2778
ac145307
BS
2779@ifset C6X
2780@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2781
2782@c man begin OPTIONS
2783
2784The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2785libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2786all executables use an index of 0.
2787
2788@table @gcctabopt
2789
2790@kindex --dsbt-size
2791@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2792This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2793or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2794entries.
2795
2796@kindex --dsbt-index
2797@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2798This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2799to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2800executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2801@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2802
fbd9ad90
PB
2803@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2804The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2805exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2806
ac145307
BS
2807@end table
2808
2809@c man end
2810@end ifset
2811
93fd0973
SC
2812@ifset M68HC11
2813@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2814
2815@c man begin OPTIONS
2816
2817The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2818memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2819
2820@table @gcctabopt
2821
2822@kindex --no-trampoline
2823@item --no-trampoline
2824This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2825is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2826instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2827
2828@kindex --bank-window
2829@item --bank-window @var{name}
2830This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2831the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2832The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2833paging and addresses within the memory window.
2834
2835@end table
2836
2837@c man end
2838@end ifset
2839
7fb9f789
NC
2840@ifset M68K
2841@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2842
2843@c man begin OPTIONS
2844
2845The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2846when linking for 68K targets.
2847
2848@table @gcctabopt
2849
2850@kindex --got
2851@item --got=@var{type}
2852This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2853@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2854@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2855Info entry for @file{ld}.
2856
2857@end table
2858
2859@c man end
2860@end ifset
2861
833794fc
MR
2862@ifset MIPS
2863@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2864
2865@c man begin OPTIONS
2866
2867The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2868generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2869
2870@table @gcctabopt
2871
2872@kindex --insn32
2873@item --insn32
2874@kindex --no-insn32
2875@itemx --no-insn32
2876These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2877generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2878or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
287932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2880used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2881possible.
2882
2883@end table
2884
2885@c man end
2886@end ifset
2887
252b5132
RH
2888@ifset UsesEnvVars
2889@node Environment
2890@section Environment Variables
2891
0285c67d
NC
2892@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2893
560e09e9 2894You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2895@ifclear SingleFormat
2896@code{GNUTARGET},
2897@end ifclear
2898@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2899
36f63dca 2900@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2901@kindex GNUTARGET
2902@cindex default input format
2903@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2904use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2905of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2906@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2907of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2908attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2909this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2910there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2911object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2912BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2913in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2914@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2915
2916@kindex LDEMULATION
2917@cindex default emulation
2918@cindex emulation, default
2919@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2920@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2921behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2922available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2923the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2924variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2925linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2926
2927@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2928@cindex demangling, default
2929Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2930@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2931default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2932a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2933may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2934options.
2935
0285c67d
NC
2936@c man end
2937@end ifset
2938
252b5132
RH
2939@node Scripts
2940@chapter Linker Scripts
2941
2942@cindex scripts
2943@cindex linker scripts
2944@cindex command files
2945Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2946written in the linker command language.
2947
2948The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2949the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2950the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2951more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2952direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2953described below.
2954
2955The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2956yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2957linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2958to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2959such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2960
2961You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2962line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2963default linker script.
2964
2965You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2966to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2967Linker Scripts}.
2968
2969@menu
2970* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2971* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2972* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2973* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2974* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2975* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2976* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2977* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2978* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2979* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2980* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2981@end menu
2982
2983@node Basic Script Concepts
2984@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2985@cindex linker script concepts
2986We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2987describe the linker script language.
2988
2989The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2990file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2991@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2992The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2993purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2994among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2995section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2996in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2997
2998Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2999also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3000contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3001the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3002A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3003area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3004loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3005which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3006of debugging information.
3007
3008Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3009first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3010the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3011@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3012section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3013same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3014is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3015(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3016based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3017RAM address would be the VMA.
3018
3019You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3020program with the @samp{-h} option.
3021
3022Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3023@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3024has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3025information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3026will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3027static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3028referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3029
3030You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3031program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3032option.
3033
3034@node Script Format
3035@section Linker Script Format
3036@cindex linker script format
3037Linker scripts are text files.
3038
3039You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3040either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3041symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3042generally ignored.
3043
3044Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3045If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3046otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3047double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3048file name.
3049
3050You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3051@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3052to whitespace.
3053
3054@node Simple Example
3055@section Simple Linker Script Example
3056@cindex linker script example
3057@cindex example of linker script
3058Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3059
3060The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3061@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3062memory layout of the output file.
3063
3064The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3065describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3066code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3067@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3068Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3069your input files.
3070
3071For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30720x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3073linker script which will do that:
3074@smallexample
3075SECTIONS
3076@{
3077 . = 0x10000;
3078 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3079 . = 0x8000000;
3080 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3081 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3082@}
3083@end smallexample
3084
3085You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3086followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3087descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3088
252b5132
RH
3089The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3090sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3091counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3092other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3093current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3094incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3095@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3096
3097The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3098required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3099after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3100which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3101wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3102means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3103
3104Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3105@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3106@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3107
3108The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3109the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3110at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3111output section, the value of the location counter will be
3112@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3113effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3114immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3115
3116The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3117alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3118example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3119sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3120may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3121sections.
3122
3123That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3124
3125@node Simple Commands
3126@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3127@cindex linker script simple commands
3128In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3129
3130@menu
3131* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3132* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3133@ifclear SingleFormat
3134* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3135@end ifclear
3136
4a93e180 3137* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3138* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3139@end menu
3140
3141@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3142@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3143@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3144@cindex start of execution
3145@cindex first instruction
3146@cindex entry point
3147The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3148point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3149entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3150@smallexample
3151ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3152@end smallexample
3153
3154There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3155entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3156stopping when one of them succeeds:
3157@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3158@item
252b5132 3159the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3160@item
252b5132 3161the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3162@item
3ab904c4
NC
3163the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3164targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3165check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3166@item
252b5132 3167the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3168@item
252b5132
RH
3169The address @code{0}.
3170@end itemize
3171
3172@node File Commands
36f63dca 3173@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3174@cindex linker script file commands
3175Several linker script commands deal with files.
3176
3177@table @code
3178@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3179@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3180@cindex including a linker script
3181Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3182be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3183with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
318410 levels deep.
3185
4006703d
NS
3186You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3187@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3188
252b5132
RH
3189@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3190@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3191@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3192@cindex input files in linker scripts
3193@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3194@cindex linker script input object files
3195The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3196in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3197
3198For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3199a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3200then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3201
3202In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3203script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3204
e3f2db7f
AO
3205In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3206with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3207located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3208for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3209open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3210linker will search through the archive library search path.
3211The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3212as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3213description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3214
ff5dcc92 3215If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3216name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3217@samp{-l}.
3218
3219When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3220files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3221script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3222
3223@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3224@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3225@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3226@cindex grouping input files
3227The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3228files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3229new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3230in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3231
b717d30e
JJ
3232@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3233@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3234@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3235This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3236commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3237as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3238with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3239when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3240@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3241and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3242setting afterwards.
3243
252b5132
RH
3244@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3245@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3246@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3247The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3248@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3249@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3250Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3251precedence.
3252
3253You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3254output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3255
3256@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3257@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3258@cindex library search path in linker script
3259@cindex archive search path in linker script
3260@cindex search path in linker script
3261The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3262@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3263@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3264on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3265are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3266the command line option are searched first.
3267
3268@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3269@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3270@cindex first input file
3271The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3272that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3273though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3274when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3275first file.
3276@end table
3277
3278@ifclear SingleFormat
3279@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3280@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3281A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3282
3283@table @code
3284@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3285@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3286@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3287@cindex output file format in linker script
3288The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3289output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3290exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3291(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3292line option takes precedence.
3293
3294You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3295formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3296This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3297desired endianness.
3298
3299If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3300will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3301output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3302used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3303
3304For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3305command:
3306@smallexample
3307OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3308@end smallexample
3309This says that the default format for the output file is
3310@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3311option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3312format.
3313
3314@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3315@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3316@cindex input file format in linker script
3317The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3318files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3319This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3320(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3321is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3322command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3323@end table
3324@end ifclear
3325
4a93e180
NC
3326@node REGION_ALIAS
3327@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3328@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3329@cindex region alias
3330@cindex region names
3331
3332Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3333@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3334
3335@smallexample
3336REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3337@end smallexample
3338
3339The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3340memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3341to memory regions. An example follows.
3342
3343Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3344memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3345that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3346non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3347access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3348read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3349sections:
3350
3351@itemize @bullet
3352@item
3353@code{.text} program code;
3354@item
3355@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3356@item
3357@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3358@item
3359@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3360@end itemize
3361
3362The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3363part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3364output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3365systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3366@code{C}:
3367@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3368@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3369@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3370@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3371@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3372@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3373@end multitable
3374The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3375loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3376the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3377the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3378
3379The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3380includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3381memory layout:
3382@smallexample
3383INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3384
3385SECTIONS
3386 @{
3387 .text :
3388 @{
3389 *(.text)
3390 @} > REGION_TEXT
3391 .rodata :
3392 @{
3393 *(.rodata)
3394 rodata_end = .;
3395 @} > REGION_RODATA
3396 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3397 @{
3398 data_start = .;
3399 *(.data)
3400 @} > REGION_DATA
3401 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3402 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3403 .bss :
3404 @{
3405 *(.bss)
3406 @} > REGION_BSS
3407 @}
3408@end smallexample
3409
3410Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3411regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3412variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3413@table @code
3414@item A
3415Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3416@smallexample
3417MEMORY
3418 @{
3419 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3420 @}
3421
3422REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3423REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3424REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3425REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3426@end smallexample
3427@item B
3428Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3429into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3430@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3431@smallexample
3432MEMORY
3433 @{
3434 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3435 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3436 @}
3437
3438REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3439REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3440REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3441REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3442@end smallexample
3443@item C
3444Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3445@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3446initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3447system start into the @code{RAM}.
3448@smallexample
3449MEMORY
3450 @{
3451 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3452 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3453 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3454 @}
3455
3456REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3457REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3458REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3459REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3460@end smallexample
3461@end table
3462
3463It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3464@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3465necessary:
3466@smallexample
3467#include <string.h>
3468
3469extern char data_start [];
3470extern char data_size [];
3471extern char data_load_start [];
3472
3473void copy_data(void)
3474@{
3475 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3476 @{
3477 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3478 @}
3479@}
3480@end smallexample
3481
252b5132 3482@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3483@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3484There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3485
3486@table @code
3487@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3488@kindex ASSERT
3489@cindex assertion in linker script
3490Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3491with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3492
fd1c4238
NC
3493Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3494take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3495inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3496for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3497symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3498
3499@smallexample
3500 .stack :
3501 @{
3502 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3503 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3504 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3505 @}
3506@end smallexample
3507
3508will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3509PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3510can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3511
3512@smallexample
3513 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3514 .stack :
3515 @{
3516 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3517 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3518 @}
3519@end smallexample
3520
3521will work.
3522
252b5132
RH
3523@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3524@kindex EXTERN
3525@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3526Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3527symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3528modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3529each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3530command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3531
3532@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3533@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3534@cindex common allocation in linker script
3535This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3536to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3537output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3538
4818e05f
AM
3539@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3540@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3541@cindex common allocation in linker script
3542This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3543command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3544to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3545
53d25da6
AM
3546@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3547@kindex INSERT
3548@cindex insert user script into default script
3549This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3550augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3551inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3552@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3553default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3554sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3555linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3556insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3557linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3558default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3559of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3560to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3561is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3562
3563@smallexample
3564SECTIONS
3565@{
3566 OVERLAY :
3567 @{
3568 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3569 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3570 @}
3571@}
3572INSERT AFTER .text;
3573@end smallexample
3574
252b5132
RH
3575@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3576@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3577@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3578This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3579references among certain output sections.
3580
3581In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3582using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3583will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3584errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3585a function defined in the other section.
3586
3587The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3588@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3589an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3590@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3591names.
3592
3593@ifclear SingleFormat
3594@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3595@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3596@cindex machine architecture
3597@cindex architecture
3598Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3599of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3600architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3601the @samp{-f} option.
3602@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3603
3604@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3605@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3606This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3607@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3608in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3609@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3610@end table
3611
3612@node Assignments
3613@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3614@cindex assignment in scripts
3615@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3616@cindex variables, defining
3617You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3618the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3619
3620@menu
3621* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3622* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3623* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3624* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3625* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3626@end menu
3627
3628@node Simple Assignments
3629@subsection Simple Assignments
3630
3631You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3632
3633@table @code
3634@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3635@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3636@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3637@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3638@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3639@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3640@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3641@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3642@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3643@end table
3644
3645The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3646@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3647defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3648
3649The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3650may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3651
3652The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3653
3654Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3655
3656You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3657statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3658section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3659
3660The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3661expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3662
3663Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3664assignments may be used:
3665
3666@smallexample
3667floating_point = 0;
3668SECTIONS
3669@{
3670 .text :
3671 @{
3672 *(.text)
3673 _etext = .;
3674 @}
156e34dd 3675 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3676 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3677@}
3678@end smallexample
3679@noindent
3680In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3681zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3682the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3683defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3684upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3685
eb8476a6
MR
3686@node HIDDEN
3687@subsection HIDDEN
3688@cindex HIDDEN
3689For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3690exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3691
3692Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3693@code{HIDDEN}:
3694
3695@smallexample
3696HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3697SECTIONS
3698@{
3699 .text :
3700 @{
3701 *(.text)
3702 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3703 @}
3704 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3705 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3706@}
3707@end smallexample
3708@noindent
3709In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3710
252b5132
RH
3711@node PROVIDE
3712@subsection PROVIDE
3713@cindex PROVIDE
3714In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3715only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3716the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3717@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3718@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3719@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3720@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3721@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3722
3723Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3724@smallexample
3725SECTIONS
3726@{
3727 .text :
3728 @{
3729 *(.text)
3730 _etext = .;
3731 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3732 @}
3733@}
3734@end smallexample
3735
3736In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3737underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3738the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3739underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3740If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3741linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3742
7af8e998
L
3743@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3744@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3745@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3746Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3747hidden and won't be exported.
3748
73ae6183
NC
3749@node Source Code Reference
3750@subsection Source Code Reference
3751
3752Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3753intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3754a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3755symbol that does not have a value.
3756
3757Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3758transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3759stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3760prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3761mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3762of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3763variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3764linker script variable might be referred to as:
3765
3766@smallexample
3767 extern int foo;
3768@end smallexample
3769
3770But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3771
3772@smallexample
3773 _foo = 1000;
3774@end smallexample
3775
3776In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3777transformation has taken place.
3778
3779When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3780things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3781in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3782second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3783table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3784contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3785value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3786
3787@smallexample
3788 int foo = 1000;
3789@end smallexample
3790
10bf6894 3791creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3792holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3793number 1000 is initially stored.
3794
3795When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3796first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3797memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3798So:
3799
3800@smallexample
3801 foo = 1;
3802@end smallexample
3803
3804looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3805associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3806address. Whereas:
3807
3808@smallexample
3809 int * a = & foo;
3810@end smallexample
3811
10bf6894 3812looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3813and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3814the variable @samp{a}.
3815
3816Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3817the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3818an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3819
3820@smallexample
3821 foo = 1000;
3822@end smallexample
3823
3824creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3825the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3826address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3827linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3828access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3829
3830Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3831you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3832use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3833section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3834linker script contains these declarations:
3835
3836@smallexample
3837@group
3838 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3839 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3840 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3841@end group
3842@end smallexample
3843
3844Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3845
3846@smallexample
3847@group
3848 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3849
73ae6183
NC
3850 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3851@end group
3852@end smallexample
3853
3854Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3855
252b5132 3856@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3857@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3858@kindex SECTIONS
3859The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3860into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3861
3862The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3863@smallexample
3864SECTIONS
3865@{
3866 @var{sections-command}
3867 @var{sections-command}
3868 @dots{}
3869@}
3870@end smallexample
3871
3872Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3873
3874@itemize @bullet
3875@item
3876an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3877@item
3878a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3879@item
3880an output section description
3881@item
3882an overlay description
3883@end itemize
3884
3885The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3886@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3887those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3888understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3889the layout of the output file.
3890
3891Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3892below.
3893
3894If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3895linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3896section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3897input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3898example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3899in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3900
3901@menu
3902* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3903* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3904* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3905* Input Section:: Input section description
3906* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3907* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3908* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3909* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3910* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3911@end menu
3912
3913@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3914@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3915The full description of an output section looks like this:
3916@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3917@group
7e7d5768 3918@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3919 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3920 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3921 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3922 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3923 @{
3924 @var{output-section-command}
3925 @var{output-section-command}
3926 @dots{}
abc9061b 3927 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3928@end group
3929@end smallexample
3930
3931Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3932
3933The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3934name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3935The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3936the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3937The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3938
3939Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3940
3941@itemize @bullet
3942@item
3943a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3944@item
3945an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3946@item
3947data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3948@item
3949a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3950@end itemize
3951
3952@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3953@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3954@cindex name, section
3955@cindex section name
3956The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3957meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3958support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3959must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3960example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3961output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3962names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3963quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3964characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3965commas must be quoted.
3966
3967The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3968Discarding}.
3969
3970@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3971@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3972@cindex address, section
3973@cindex section address
3974The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3975address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3976is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3977
3978If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3979section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3980to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3981alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3982contained within the output section.
3983
3984The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3985
3986@itemize @bullet
3987@item
3988If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3989is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3990in that region.
3991
3992@item
3993If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3994regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3995section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3996be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3997
3998@item
3999If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4000the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4001counter.
4002@end itemize
4003
4004@noindent
4005For example:
4006
252b5132
RH
4007@smallexample
4008.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4009@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4010
252b5132
RH
4011@noindent
4012and
ea5cae92 4013
252b5132
RH
4014@smallexample
4015.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4016@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4017
252b5132
RH
4018@noindent
4019are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4020@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4021counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4022counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4023input sections.
252b5132
RH
4024
4025The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4026For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4027so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4028do something like this:
4029@smallexample
4030.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4031@end smallexample
4032@noindent
4033This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4034aligned upward to the specified value.
4035
4036Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4037location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4038sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4039
4040@node Input Section
36f63dca 4041@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4042@cindex input sections
4043@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4044The most common output section command is an input section description.
4045
4046The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4047You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4048in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4049map the input files into your memory layout.
4050
4051@menu
4052* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4053* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4054* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4055* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4056* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4057@end menu
4058
4059@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4060@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4061@cindex input section basics
4062An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4063by a list of section names in parentheses.
4064
4065The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4066describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4067
4068The most common input section description is to include all input
4069sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4070include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4071@smallexample
4072*(.text)
4073@end smallexample
4074@noindent
18625d54
CM
4075Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4076of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4077match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4078example:
252b5132 4079@smallexample
b4346c09 4080*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4081@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4082will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4083@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4084
4085There are two ways to include more than one section:
4086@smallexample
4087*(.text .rdata)
4088*(.text) *(.rdata)
4089@end smallexample
4090@noindent
4091The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4092@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4093first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4094they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4095@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4096@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4097
4098You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4099You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4100needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4101@smallexample
4102data.o(.data)
4103@end smallexample
4104
ae17ab41
CM
4105To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4106of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4107
4108Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4109
4110@smallexample
4111@group
4112SECTIONS @{
4113 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4114 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4115@}
4116@end group
4117@end smallexample
4118
4119In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4120input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4121@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4122@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4123whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4124
967928e9
AM
4125You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4126matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4127with no whitespace around the colon.
4128
4129@table @samp
4130@item archive:file
4131matches file within archive
4132@item archive:
4133matches the whole archive
4134@item :file
4135matches file but not one in an archive
4136@end table
4137
4138Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4139wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4140single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4141@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4142within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4143also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4144other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4145from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4146command.
4147
252b5132
RH
4148If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4149the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4150commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4151@smallexample
4152data.o
4153@end smallexample
4154
967928e9
AM
4155When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4156and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4157characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4158name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4159did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4160though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4161@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4162the archive search path.
4163
4164@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4165@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4166@cindex input section wildcards
4167@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4168@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4169@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4170In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4171name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4172
4173The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4174pattern for the file name.
4175
4176The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4177
4178@table @samp
4179@item *
4180matches any number of characters
4181@item ?
4182matches any single character
4183@item [@var{chars}]
4184matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4185character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4186@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4187@item \
4188quotes the following character
4189@end table
4190
4191When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4192will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4193Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4194exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4195@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4196a @samp{/} character.
4197
4198File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4199specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4200does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4201
4202If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4203appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4204will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4205sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4206@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4207@smallexample
4208.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4209.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4210@end smallexample
4211
bcaa7b3e 4212@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4213Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4214in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4215this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4216pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4217@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4218into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4219
bcaa7b3e
L
4220@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4221@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4222difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4223descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4224Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4225reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4226
02ecc8e9
L
4227@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4228@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4229difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4230ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4231encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4232
bcaa7b3e
L
4233@cindex SORT
4234@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4235
4236When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4237can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4238
4239@enumerate
4240@item
4241@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4242It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4243sections have the same name.
4244@item
4245@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4246It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4247sections have the same alignment.
4248@item
c0065db7 4249@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4250treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4251@item
4252@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4253is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4254@item
4255All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4256@end enumerate
4257
4258When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4259section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4260takes precedence over the command line option.
4261
4262If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4263command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4264treated as nested sorting command.
4265
4266@enumerate
4267@item
4268@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4269@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4270@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4271@item
4272@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4273@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4274@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4275@end enumerate
4276
4277If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4278command line option will be ignored.
4279
eda680f8
L
4280@cindex SORT_NONE
4281@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4282section sorting option.
4283
252b5132
RH
4284If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4285@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4286precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4287
4288This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4289files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4290sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4291The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4292with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4293linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4294@smallexample
4295@group
4296SECTIONS @{
4297 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4298 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4299 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4300 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4301@}
4302@end group
4303@end smallexample
4304
4305@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4306@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4307@cindex common symbol placement
4308@cindex uninitialized data placement
4309A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4310file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4311linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4312named @samp{COMMON}.
4313
4314You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4315other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4316particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4317input files are placed in another section.
4318
4319In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4320@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4321@smallexample
4322.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4323@end smallexample
4324
4325@cindex scommon section
4326@cindex small common symbols
4327Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4328example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4329symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4330different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4331the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4332symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4333to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4334locations.
4335
4336@cindex [COMMON]
4337You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4338notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4339@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4340
4341@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4342@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4343@cindex KEEP
4344@cindex garbage collection
4345When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4346it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4347This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4348with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4349@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4350
4351@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4352@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4353The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4354to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4355start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4356@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4357follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4358@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4359@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4360All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4361files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4362
4363@smallexample
4364@group
4365SECTIONS @{
4366 outputa 0x10000 :
4367 @{
4368 all.o
4369 foo.o (.input1)
4370 @}
36f63dca
NC
4371@end group
4372@group
252b5132
RH
4373 outputb :
4374 @{
4375 foo.o (.input2)
4376 foo1.o (.input1)
4377 @}
36f63dca
NC
4378@end group
4379@group
252b5132
RH
4380 outputc :
4381 @{
4382 *(.input1)
4383 *(.input2)
4384 @}
4385@}
4386@end group
a1ab1d2a 4387@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4388
4389@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4390@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4391@cindex data
4392@cindex section data
4393@cindex output section data
4394@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4395@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4396@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4397@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4398@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4399You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4400@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4401an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4402parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4403value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4404counter.
4405
4406The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4407store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4408bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4409stored.
4410
4411For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4412of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4413@smallexample
4414BYTE(1)
4415LONG(addr)
4416@end smallexample
4417
4418When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4419same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4420target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4421@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4422@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4423
4424If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4425which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4426When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4427true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4428endianness of the first input object file.
4429
36f63dca 4430Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4431between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4432@smallexample
4433SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4434@end smallexample
4435whereas this will work:
4436@smallexample
4437SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4438@end smallexample
4439
252b5132
RH
4440@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4441@cindex holes, filling
4442@cindex unspecified memory
4443You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4444current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4445otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4446gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4447with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4448necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4449point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4450than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4451different parts of an output section.
4452
4453This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4454value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4455@smallexample
563e308f 4456FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4460section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4461part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4462entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4463precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4464expression.
252b5132
RH
4465
4466@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4467@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4468There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4469commands.
4470
4471@table @code
4472@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4473@cindex input filename symbols
4474@cindex filename symbols
4475@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4476The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4477The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4478file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4479the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4480
4481This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4482normally used for any other object file format.
4483
4484@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4485@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4486@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4487@item CONSTRUCTORS
4488When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4489unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4490destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4491arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4492automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4493For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4494linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4495@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4496ignored for other object file formats.
4497
4498The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4499constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4500Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4501the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4502first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4503of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4504compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4505formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4506@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4507the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4508destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4509@code{exit}.
4510
4511For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4512arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4513addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4514and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4515linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4516runtime code expects to see.
4517
4518@smallexample
4519 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4520 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4521 *(.ctors)
4522 LONG(0)
4523 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4524 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4525 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4526 *(.dtors)
4527 LONG(0)
4528 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4529@end smallexample
4530
4531If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4532which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4533are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4534are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4535command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4536@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4537@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4538@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4539
4540Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4541and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4542need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4543scripts.
4544
4545@end table
4546
4547@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4548@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4549@cindex discarding sections
4550@cindex sections, discarding
4551@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4552The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4553This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4554may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4555@smallexample
49c13adb 4556.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4557@end smallexample
4558@noindent
4559will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4560@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4561sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4562space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4563too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4564space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4565@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4566@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4567This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4568
a0976ea4 4569The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4570on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4571symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4572the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4573section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4574
4575@cindex /DISCARD/
4576The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4577input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4578section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4579
4580@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4581@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4582@cindex output section attributes
4583We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4584like this:
0c71d759 4585
252b5132 4586@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4587@group
7e7d5768 4588@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4589 [AT(@var{lma})]
4590 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4591 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4592 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4593 @{
4594 @var{output-section-command}
4595 @var{output-section-command}
4596 @dots{}
562d3460 4597 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4598@end group
4599@end smallexample
0c71d759 4600
252b5132
RH
4601We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4602@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4603remaining section attributes.
4604
a1ab1d2a 4605@menu
252b5132
RH
4606* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4607* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4608* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4609* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4610* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4611* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4612* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4613* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4614@end menu
4615
4616@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4617@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4618Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4619parentheses. The following types are defined:
4620
4621@table @code
4622@item NOLOAD
4623The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4624loaded into memory when the program is run.
4625@item DSECT
4626@itemx COPY
4627@itemx INFO
4628@itemx OVERLAY
4629These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4630rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4631marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4632section when the program is run.
4633@end table
4634
4635@kindex NOLOAD
4636@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4637@cindex loading, preventing
4638The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4639the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4640the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4641@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4642need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4643@smallexample
4644@group
4645SECTIONS @{
4646 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4647 @dots{}
4648@}
4649@end group
4650@end smallexample
4651
4652@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4653@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4654@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4655@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4656@cindex load address
4657@cindex section load address
4658Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4659@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4660@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4661specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4662address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4663
ea5cae92
NC
4664The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4665specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4666takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4667load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4668region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4669
4670If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4671section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4672load address:
4673
4674@itemize @bullet
4675@item
4676If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4677the LMA address as well.
4678
4679@item
4680If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4681
4682@item
4683Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4684with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4685section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4686VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4687the last section in the located region.
4688
4689@item
4690If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4691that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4692
4693@item
4694If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4695section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4696@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4697
4698@cindex ROM initialized data
4699@cindex initialized data in ROM
4700This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4701example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4702called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4703@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4704even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4705uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4706defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4707counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4708
4709@smallexample
4710@group
4711SECTIONS
4712 @{
4713 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4714 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4715 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4716 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4717 .bss 0x3000 :
4718 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4719@}
4720@end group
4721@end smallexample
4722
4723The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4724this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4725the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4726how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4727script.
4728
4729@smallexample
4730@group
4731extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4732char *src = &_etext;
4733char *dst = &_data;
4734
ea5cae92
NC
4735/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4736while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4737 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4738
ea5cae92 4739/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4740for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4741 *dst = 0;
4742@end group
4743@end smallexample
4744
bbf115d3
L
4745@node Forced Output Alignment
4746@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4747@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4748@cindex forcing output section alignment
4749@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4750You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4751alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4752intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4753
7e7d5768
AM
4754@node Forced Input Alignment
4755@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4756@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4757@cindex forcing input section alignment
4758@cindex input section alignment
4759You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4760SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4761sections, whether larger or smaller.
4762
0c71d759
NC
4763@node Output Section Constraint
4764@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4765@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4766@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4767@cindex constraints on output sections
4768You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4769of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4770read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4771@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4772
252b5132 4773@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4774@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4775@kindex >@var{region}
4776@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4777@cindex memory regions and sections
4778You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4779using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4780
4781Here is a simple example:
4782@smallexample
4783@group
4784MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4785SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4786@end group
4787@end smallexample
4788
4789@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4790@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4791@kindex :@var{phdr}
4792@cindex section, assigning to program header
4793@cindex program headers and sections
4794You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4795using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4796one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4797assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4798@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4799linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4800
4801Here is a simple example:
4802@smallexample
4803@group
4804PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4805SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4806@end group
4807@end smallexample
4808
4809@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4810@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4811@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4812@cindex section fill pattern
4813@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4814You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4815@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4816(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4817within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4818alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4819necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4820of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4821an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4822fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4823other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4824pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4825expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4826
4827You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4828output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4829
4830Here is a simple example:
4831@smallexample
4832@group
563e308f 4833SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4834@end group
4835@end smallexample
4836
4837@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4838@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4839@kindex OVERLAY
4840@cindex overlays
4841An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4842are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4843the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4844copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4845required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4846can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4847than another.
4848
4849Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4850@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4851output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4852command is as follows:
4853@smallexample
4854@group
4855OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4856 @{
4857 @var{secname1}
4858 @{
4859 @var{output-section-command}
4860 @var{output-section-command}
4861 @dots{}
4862 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4863 @var{secname2}
4864 @{
4865 @var{output-section-command}
4866 @var{output-section-command}
4867 @dots{}
4868 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4869 @dots{}
abc9061b 4870 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4871@end group
4872@end smallexample
4873
4874Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4875section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4876section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4877those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4878except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4879sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4880
abc9061b
CC
4881The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4882the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4883
252b5132
RH
4884The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4885addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4886memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4887whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4888and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4889and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4890
56dd11f0
NC
4891If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4892references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4893the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4894sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4895@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4896
4897For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4898provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4899defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4900@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4901the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4902within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4903symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4904
4905At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4906the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4907
4908Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4909@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4910@smallexample
4911@group
4912 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4913 @{
4914 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4915 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4916 @}
4917@end group
4918@end smallexample
4919@noindent
4920This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4921address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4922@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4923following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4924@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4925@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4926
4927C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4928like the following.
4929
4930@smallexample
4931@group
4932 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4933 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4934 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4935@end group
4936@end smallexample
4937
4938Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4939everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4940example could have been written identically as follows.
4941
4942@smallexample
4943@group
4944 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4945 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4946 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4947 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4948 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4949 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4950 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4951@end group
4952@end smallexample
4953
4954@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4955@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4956@kindex MEMORY
4957@cindex memory regions
4958@cindex regions of memory
4959@cindex allocating memory
4960@cindex discontinuous memory
4961The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4962memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4963
4964The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4965memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4966may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4967can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4968set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4969regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4970around to fit into the available regions.
4971
4972A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4973command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4974you wish. The syntax is:
4975@smallexample
4976@group
a1ab1d2a 4977MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4978 @{
4979 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4980 @dots{}
4981 @}
4982@end group
4983@end smallexample
4984
4985The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4986region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4987Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4988with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4989must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4990add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4991command.
252b5132
RH
4992
4993@cindex memory region attributes
4994The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4995whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4996not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4997@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4998section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4999the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5000them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5001
5002The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5003@table @samp
5004@item R
5005Read-only section
5006@item W
5007Read/write section
5008@item X
5009Executable section
5010@item A
5011Allocatable section
5012@item I
5013Initialized section
5014@item L
5015Same as @samp{I}
5016@item !
c09e9a8c 5017Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5018@end table
5019
5020If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5021@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5022attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5023in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5024attributes.
5025
5026@kindex ORIGIN =
5027@kindex o =
5028@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5029The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5030the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5031cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5032abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5033@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5034
5035@kindex LENGTH =
5036@kindex len =
5037@kindex l =
5038The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5039region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5040be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5041@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5042
5043In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5044available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5045and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5046linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5047is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5048or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5049explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5050region.
5051
5052@smallexample
5053@group
a1ab1d2a 5054MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5055 @{
5056 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5057 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5058 @}
5059@end group
5060@end smallexample
5061
5062Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5063specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5064@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5065a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5066output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5067was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5068the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5069output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5070region, the linker will issue an error message.
5071
3ec57632 5072It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5073expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5074@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5075
5076@smallexample
5077@group
c0065db7 5078 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5079@end group
5080@end smallexample
5081
252b5132
RH
5082@node PHDRS
5083@section PHDRS Command
5084@kindex PHDRS
5085@cindex program headers
5086@cindex ELF program headers
5087@cindex program segments
5088@cindex segments, ELF
5089The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5090@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5091loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5092program with the @samp{-p} option.
5093
5094When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5095reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5096program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5097This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5098interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5099
5100The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5101in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5102precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5103the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5104not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5105
5106The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5107generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5108ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5109
5110This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5111@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5112
5113@smallexample
5114@group
5115PHDRS
5116@{
5117 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5118 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5119@}
5120@end group
5121@end smallexample
5122
5123The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5124of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5125header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5126with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5127must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5128is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5129
5130Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5131system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5132specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5133sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5134attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5135Section Phdr}.
5136
5137It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5138merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5139repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5140contain the section.
5141
5142If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5143then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5144not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5145convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5146placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5147default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5148segment at all.
5149
5150@kindex FILEHDR
5151@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5152You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5153the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5154The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5155file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5156include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5157segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5158these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5159
5160The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5161value of the keyword.
5162
5163@table @asis
5164@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5165Indicates an unused program header.
5166
5167@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5168Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5169the file.
5170
5171@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5172Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5173
5174@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5175Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5176found.
5177
5178@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5179Indicates a segment holding note information.
5180
5181@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5182A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5183ABI.
5184
5185@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5186Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5187
5188@item @var{expression}
5189An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5190be used for types not defined above.
5191@end table
5192
5193You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5194in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5195@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5196Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5197output section attribute.
5198
5199The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5200which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5201explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5202an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5203header.
5204
5205Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5206headers used on a native ELF system.
5207
5208@example
5209@group
5210PHDRS
5211@{
5212 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5213 interp PT_INTERP ;
5214 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5215 data PT_LOAD ;
5216 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5217@}
5218
5219SECTIONS
5220@{
5221 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5222 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5223 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5224 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5225 @dots{}
5226 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5227 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5228 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5229 @dots{}
5230@}
5231@end group
5232@end example
5233
5234@node VERSION
5235@section VERSION Command
5236@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5237@cindex symbol versions
5238@cindex version script
5239@cindex versions of symbols
5240The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5241only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5242symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5243a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5244shared library.
5245
5246You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5247you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5248also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5249
5250The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5251@smallexample
5252VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5253@end smallexample
5254
5255The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5256Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5257version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5258version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5259version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5260scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5261library.
5262
5263The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5264examples.
5265
5266@smallexample
5267VERS_1.1 @{
5268 global:
5269 foo1;
5270 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5271 old*;
5272 original*;
5273 new*;
252b5132
RH
5274@};
5275
5276VERS_1.2 @{
5277 foo2;
5278@} VERS_1.1;
5279
5280VERS_2.0 @{
5281 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5282 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5283 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5284 "f(int, double)";
5285 @};
252b5132
RH
5286@} VERS_1.2;
5287@end smallexample
5288
5289This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5290version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5291The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5292a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5293of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5294symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5295is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5296in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5297However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5298name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5299
5300Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5301depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5302to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5303
5304Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5305depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5306and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5307
5308When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5309specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5310unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5311unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5312somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5313wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5314wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5315set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5316ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5317
5318The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5319they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5320could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5321However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5322
0f6bf451 5323Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5324in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5325symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5326won't.
5327
5328@smallexample
7c9c73be 5329@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5330@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5331
252b5132
RH
5332When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5333symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5334requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5335shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5336loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5337linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5338application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5339way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5340all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5341search for each symbol reference.
5342
5343The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5344doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5345that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5346functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5347the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5348required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5349that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5350versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5351the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5352
5353There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5354first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5355source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5356script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5357maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5358@smallexample
5359__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5360@end smallexample
5361@noindent
5362in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5363be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5364The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5365@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5366takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5367
5368The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5369function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5370an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5371version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5372linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5373
5374To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5375source file. Here is an example:
5376
5377@smallexample
5378__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5379__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5380__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5381__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5382@end smallexample
5383
5384In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5385unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5386example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5387@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5388
5389When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5390some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5391this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5392@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5393declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5394you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5395
5396If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5397within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5398(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5399specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5400
cb840a31
L
5401You can also specify the language in the version script:
5402
5403@smallexample
5404VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5405@end smallexample
5406
c0065db7 5407The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5408The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5409demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5410patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5411@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5412
86043bbb
MM
5413Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5414described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5415or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5416the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5417whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5418cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5419might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5420should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5421expect when you upgrade.
5422
252b5132
RH
5423@node Expressions
5424@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5425@cindex expressions
5426@cindex arithmetic
5427The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5428that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5429expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5430host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5431
5432You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5433
5434The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5435expressions.
5436
5437@menu
5438* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5439* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5440* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5441* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5442* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5443* Operators:: Operators
5444* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5445* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5446* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5447@end menu
5448
5449@node Constants
5450@subsection Constants
5451@cindex integer notation
5452@cindex constants in linker scripts
5453All constants are integers.
5454
5455As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5456octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5457hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5458@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5459@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5460value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5461
5462@cindex scaled integers
5463@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5464@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5465@cindex suffixes for integers
5466@cindex integer suffixes
5467In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5468constant by
5469@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5470@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5471@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5472@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5473@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5474@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5475@tex
5476${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5477@end tex
5478@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5479respectively. For example, the following
5480all refer to the same quantity:
5481
252b5132 5482@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5483_fourk_1 = 4K;
5484_fourk_2 = 4096;
5485_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5486_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5487@end smallexample
5488
8a308ae8
NC
5489Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5490conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5491
0c71d759
NC
5492@node Symbolic Constants
5493@subsection Symbolic Constants
5494@cindex symbolic constants
5495@kindex CONSTANT
5496It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5497the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5498
5499@table @code
5500@item MAXPAGESIZE
5501@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5502The target's maximum page size.
5503
5504@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5505@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5506The target's default page size.
5507@end table
5508
5509So for example:
5510
5511@smallexample
9d5777a3 5512 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5513@end smallexample
5514
5515will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5516supported by the target.
5517
252b5132
RH
5518@node Symbols
5519@subsection Symbol Names
5520@cindex symbol names
5521@cindex names
5522@cindex quoted symbol names
5523@kindex "
5524Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5525and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5526Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5527specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5528keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5529@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5530"SECTION" = 9;
5531"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5532@end smallexample
5533
5534Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5535to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5536whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5537
ecca9871
L
5538@node Orphan Sections
5539@subsection Orphan Sections
5540@cindex orphan
5541Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5542are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5543script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5544output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5545placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5546attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5547same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5548If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5549at the end of the file.
5550
5551For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5552well as section flag.
5553
41911f68 5554If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5555the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5556__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5557section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5558orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5559representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5560character.
5561
252b5132
RH
5562@node Location Counter
5563@subsection The Location Counter
5564@kindex .
5565@cindex dot
5566@cindex location counter
5567@cindex current output location
5568The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5569current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5570location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5571within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5572anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5573
5574@cindex holes
5575Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5576moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5577location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5578and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5579doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5580
5581@smallexample
5582SECTIONS
5583@{
5584 output :
5585 @{
5586 file1(.text)
5587 . = . + 1000;
5588 file2(.text)
5589 . += 1000;
5590 file3(.text)
563e308f 5591 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5592@}
5593@end smallexample
5594@noindent
5595In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5596located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5597followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5598@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5599@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5600specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5601
5c6bbab8
NC
5602@cindex dot inside sections
5603Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5604current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5605statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5606absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5607however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5608not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5609
5610@smallexample
5611SECTIONS
5612@{
5613 . = 0x100
5614 .text: @{
5615 *(.text)
5616 . = 0x200
5617 @}
5618 . = 0x500
5619 .data: @{
5620 *(.data)
5621 . += 0x600
5622 @}
5623@}
5624@end smallexample
5625
5626The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5627and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5628the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5629much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5630move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5631and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5632the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5633the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5634
b5666f2f
AM
5635@cindex dot outside sections
5636Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5637output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5638needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5639
5640@smallexample
5641SECTIONS
5642@{
5643 start_of_text = . ;
5644 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5645 end_of_text = . ;
5646
5647 start_of_data = . ;
5648 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5649 end_of_data = . ;
5650@}
5651@end smallexample
5652
5653If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5654not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5655between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5656should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5657blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5658the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5659sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5660statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5661special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5662place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5663as follows:
5664
5665@smallexample
5666SECTIONS
5667@{
5668 start_of_text = . ;
5669 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5670 end_of_text = . ;
5671
5672 start_of_data = . ;
5673 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5674 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5675 end_of_data = . ;
5676@}
5677@end smallexample
5678
5679This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5680@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5681placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5682assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5683a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5684section. So you could write:
5685
5686@smallexample
5687SECTIONS
5688@{
5689 start_of_text = . ;
5690 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5691 end_of_text = . ;
5692
5693 . = . ;
5694 start_of_data = . ;
5695 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5696 end_of_data = . ;
5697@}
5698@end smallexample
5699
5700Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5701@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5702
252b5132
RH
5703@need 2000
5704@node Operators
5705@subsection Operators
5706@cindex operators for arithmetic
5707@cindex arithmetic operators
5708@cindex precedence in expressions
5709The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5710the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5711@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5712@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5713@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5714@smallexample
5715precedence associativity Operators Notes
5716(highest)
57171 left ! - ~ (1)
57182 left * / %
57193 left + -
57204 left >> <<
57215 left == != > < <= >=
57226 left &
57237 left |
57248 left &&
57259 left ||
572610 right ? :
572711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5728(lowest)
5729@end smallexample
5730Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5731(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5732(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5733@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5734@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5735@tex
5736\vskip \baselineskip
5737%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5738\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5739\hrule
5740\halign
5741{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5742height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5743&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5744height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5745\noalign{\hrule}
5746height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5747&highest&&&&&\cr
5748% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5749&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5750&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5751&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5752&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5753&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5754&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5755&7&&left&&|&\cr
5756&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5757&9&&left&&||&\cr
5758&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5759&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5760&lowest&&&&&\cr
5761height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5762\hrule}
5763@end tex
5764@iftex
5765{
5766@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5767@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5768@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5769}
5770@end iftex
5771@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5772
5773@node Evaluation
5774@subsection Evaluation
5775@cindex lazy evaluation
5776@cindex expression evaluation order
5777The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5778an expression when absolutely necessary.
5779
5780The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5781address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5782regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5783as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5784
5785However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5786until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5787other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5788for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5789
5790The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5791assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5792allocation.
5793
5794Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5795@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5796
5797If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5798available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5799following
5800@smallexample
5801@group
5802SECTIONS
5803 @{
a1ab1d2a 5804 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5805 @{ *(.text) @}
5806 @}
5807@end group
5808@end smallexample
5809@noindent
5810will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5811address}.
5812
5813@node Expression Section
5814@subsection The Section of an Expression
5815@cindex expression sections
5816@cindex absolute expressions
5817@cindex relative expressions
5818@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5819@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5820@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5821Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5822relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5823using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5824value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5825symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5826operations.
5827
abf4be64
AM
5828Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5829section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5830address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5831@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5832functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5833One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5834(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5835differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5836versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5837section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5838Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5839absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5840given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5841everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5842
5843In the following simple example,
252b5132 5844
7542af2a
AM
5845@smallexample
5846@group
5847SECTIONS
5848 @{
5849 . = 0x100;
5850 __executable_start = 0x100;
5851 .data :
5852 @{
5853 . = 0x10;
5854 __data_start = 0x10;
5855 *(.data)
5856 @}
5857 @dots{}
5858 @}
5859@end group
5860@end smallexample
252b5132 5861
7542af2a
AM
5862both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5863address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5864@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5865section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5866
5c3049d2
AM
5867For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5868addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5869
5870@itemize @bullet
5871@item
c05f749e
AM
5872Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5873operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5874absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5875@item
7542af2a
AM
5876Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5877relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5878and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5879@item
c05f749e
AM
5880Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5881in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5882address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5883before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5884@end itemize
5885
5886The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5887
5888@itemize @bullet
5889@item
5890An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5891@item
5892The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5893@item
9bc8bb33 5894The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5895relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5896(after above conversions) is also a number.
5897@item
5898The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5899relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5900section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5901@item
5902The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5903conversions) is an absolute address.
5904@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5905
5906You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5907to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5908create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5909section @samp{.data}:
5910@smallexample
5911SECTIONS
5912 @{
5913 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5914 @}
5915@end smallexample
5916@noindent
5917If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5918@samp{.data} section.
5919
7542af2a
AM
5920Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5921particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5922
252b5132
RH
5923@node Builtin Functions
5924@subsection Builtin Functions
5925@cindex functions in expressions
5926The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5927use in linker script expressions.
5928
5929@table @code
5930@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5931@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5932@cindex expression, absolute
5933Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5934of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5935value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5936normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5937
5938@item ADDR(@var{section})
5939@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5940@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5941Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5942script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5943the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5944@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5945@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5946the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5947@smallexample
5948@group
5949SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5950 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5951 @{
252b5132
RH
5952 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5953 @dots{}
5954 @}
5955 .output :
5956 @{
5957 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5958 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5959 @}
5960@dots{} @}
5961@end group
5962@end smallexample
5963
876f4090
NS
5964@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5965@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5966@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5967@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5968@cindex round up location counter
5969@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5970@cindex round up expression
5971@cindex align expression
5972Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5973to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5974doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5975arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5976expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5977equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5978
5979Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5980next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5981variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5982input sections:
252b5132
RH
5983@smallexample
5984@group
5985SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5986 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5987 *(.data)
5988 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5989 @}
5990@dots{} @}
5991@end group
5992@end smallexample
5993@noindent
5994The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5995a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5996a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5997of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5998
5999The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6000
362c1d1a
NS
6001@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6002@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6003@cindex section alignment
6004Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6005been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6006evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6007the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6008value in that section.
6009@smallexample
6010@group
6011SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6012 .output @{
6013 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6014 @dots{}
6015 @}
6016@dots{} @}
6017@end group
6018@end smallexample
6019
252b5132
RH
6020@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6021@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6022This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6023scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6024section.
6025
2d20f7bf
JJ
6026@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6027@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6028This is equivalent to either
6029@smallexample
6030(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6031@end smallexample
6032or
6033@smallexample
6034(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6035@end smallexample
6036@noindent
6037depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6038for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6039@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6040If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6041memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6042bytes in the on-disk file.
6043
6044This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6045any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6046@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6047be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6048working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6049
6050@noindent
6051Example:
6052@smallexample
6053 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6054@end smallexample
6055
6056@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6057@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6058This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6059evaluation purposes.
6060
6061@smallexample
6062 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6063@end smallexample
6064
a4f5ad88
JJ
6065@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6066@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6067This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6068@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6069When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6070does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6071@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6072boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6073it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6074@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6075padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6076section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6077
6078@smallexample
6079 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6080@end smallexample
6081
252b5132
RH
6082@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6083@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6084@cindex symbol defaults
6085Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6086defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6087return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6088default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6089shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6090the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6091existed, its value is preserved:
6092
6093@smallexample
6094@group
6095SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6096 .text : @{
6097 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6098 @dots{}
6099 @}
6100 @dots{}
6101@}
6102@end group
6103@end smallexample
6104
3ec57632
NC
6105@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6106@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6107Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6108
252b5132
RH
6109@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6110@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6111@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6112Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6113Section LMA}).
6114
2e53f7d6
NC
6115@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6116@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6117Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6118@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6119
252b5132
RH
6120@kindex MAX
6121@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6122Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6123
6124@kindex MIN
6125@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6126Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6127
6128@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6129@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6130@cindex unallocated address, next
6131Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6132This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6133use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6134output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6135
3ec57632
NC
6136@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6137@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6138Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6139
ba916c8a
MM
6140@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6141@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6142Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6143value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6144@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6145will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6146can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6147``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6148name.
6149
252b5132
RH
6150@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6151@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6152@cindex section size
6153Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6154been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6155evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6156@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6157@smallexample
6158@group
6159SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6160 .output @{
6161 .start = . ;
6162 @dots{}
6163 .end = . ;
6164 @}
6165 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6166 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6167@dots{} @}
6168@end group
6169@end smallexample
6170
6171@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6172@itemx sizeof_headers
6173@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6174@cindex header size
6175Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6176information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6177this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6178choose, to facilitate paging.
6179
6180@cindex not enough room for program headers
6181@cindex program headers, not enough room
6182When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6183@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6184number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6185addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6186additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6187room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6188the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6189script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6190you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6191command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6192@end table
6193
6194@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6195@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6196@cindex implicit linker scripts
6197If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6198an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6199linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6200linker will report an error.
6201
6202An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6203
6204Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6205assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6206commands.
6207
6208Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6209at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6210read. This can affect archive searching.
6211
6212@ifset GENERIC
6213@node Machine Dependent
6214@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6215
6216@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6217@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6218sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6219functionality are not listed.
6220
6221@menu
36f63dca
NC
6222@ifset H8300
6223* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6224@end ifset
6225@ifset I960
6226* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6227@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6228@ifset M68HC11
6229* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6230@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6231@ifset ARM
6232* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6233@end ifset
6234@ifset HPPA
6235* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6236@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6237@ifset M68K
6238* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6239@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6240@ifset MIPS
6241* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6242@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6243@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6244* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6245@end ifset
2469cfa2 6246@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6247* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6248@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6249@ifset NDS32
6250* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6251@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6252@ifset NIOSII
6253* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6254@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6255@ifset POWERPC
6256* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6257@end ifset
6258@ifset POWERPC64
6259* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6260@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6261@ifset SPU
6262* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6263@end ifset
74459f0e 6264@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6265* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6266@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6267@ifset WIN32
6268* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6269@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6270@ifset XTENSA
6271* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6272@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6273@end menu
6274@end ifset
6275
252b5132
RH
6276@ifset H8300
6277@ifclear GENERIC
6278@raisesections
6279@end ifclear
6280
6281@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6282@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6283
6284@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6285For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6286you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6287
6288@table @emph
6289@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6290@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6291@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6292targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6293program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6294respectively.
6295
6296@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6297@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6298@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6299@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6300sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6301page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6302(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6303@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6304top page of memory).
1502569c 6305
81f5558e
NC
6306@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6307indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6308displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6309the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6310@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6311whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6312range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6313
1502569c 6314@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6315@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6316biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6317which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6318page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6319(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6320@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6321the top page of memory).
6322
6323@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6324@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
632532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6326changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6327(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6328@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6329the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6330@end table
6331
6332@ifclear GENERIC
6333@lowersections
6334@end ifclear
6335@end ifset
6336
36f63dca 6337@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6338@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6339@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6340@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6341@node Renesas
6342@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6343
c2dcd04e
NC
6344@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6345H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6346options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6347@end ifset
6348@end ifclear
6349
6350@ifset I960
6351@ifclear GENERIC
6352@raisesections
6353@end ifclear
6354
6355@node i960
6356@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6357
6358@cindex i960 support
6359
6360You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6361specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6362family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6363incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6364linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6365libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6366search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6367
6368For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6369well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6370paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6371the names
6372
6373@smallexample
6374@group
6375try
6376libtry.a
6377tryca
6378libtryca.a
6379@end group
6380@end smallexample
6381
6382@noindent
6383The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6384two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6385
6386You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6387the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6388use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6389specifies a library.
6390
6391@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6392@cindex relaxing on i960
6393@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6394you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6395@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6396them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6397instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6398instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6399target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6400not itself call any subroutines).
6401
6402@ifclear GENERIC
6403@lowersections
6404@end ifclear
6405@end ifset
6406
6407@ifset ARM
6408@ifclear GENERIC
6409@raisesections
6410@end ifclear
6411
93fd0973
SC
6412@ifset M68HC11
6413@ifclear GENERIC
6414@raisesections
6415@end ifclear
6416
6417@node M68HC11/68HC12
6418@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6419
6420@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6421
6422@subsection Linker Relaxation
6423
6424For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6425optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6426
6427@table @emph
6428@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6429@item relaxing address modes
6430@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6431targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6432program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6433respectively.
6434
6435@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6436transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6437page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6438
6439@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6440When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6441of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6442addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6443@code{bset} instructions.
6444
6445@end table
6446
6447@subsection Trampoline Generation
6448
6449@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6450@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6451For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6452call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6453will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6454trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6455case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6456point to the function trampoline.
6457
6458@ifclear GENERIC
6459@lowersections
6460@end ifclear
6461@end ifset
6462
36f63dca 6463@node ARM
3674e28a 6464@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6465
6466@cindex ARM interworking support
6467@kindex --support-old-code
6468For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6469between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6470been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6471line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6472libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6473option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6474given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6475which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6476the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6477non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6478
6479@cindex thumb entry point
6480@cindex entry point, thumb
6481@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6482The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6483@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6484But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6485branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6486executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6487
ce11ba6c
KT
6488@cindex PE import table prefixing
6489@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6490The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6491the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6492element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6493import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6494
e489d0ae
PB
6495@cindex BE8
6496@kindex --be8
6497The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6498executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6499objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6500option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6501little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6502
3674e28a
PB
6503@cindex TARGET1
6504@kindex --target1-rel
6505@kindex --target1-abs
6506The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6507@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6508or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6509and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6510
6511@cindex TARGET2
6512@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6513The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6514@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6515meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6516@table @samp
6517@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6518@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6519@item abs
6520@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6521@item got-rel
6522@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6523@end table
6524
319850b4
JB
6525@cindex FIX_V4BX
6526@kindex --fix-v4bx
6527The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6528specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6529interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6530also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6531
6532In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6533linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6534@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6535
6536In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6537relocations are ignored.
6538
845b51d6
PB
6539@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6540@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6541Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6542relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6543
6544@smallexample
6545TST rM, #1
6546MOVEQ PC, rM
6547BX Rn
6548@end smallexample
6549
6550This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6551and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6552condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6553
33bfe774
JB
6554@cindex USE_BLX
6555@kindex --use-blx
6556The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6557BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6558situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6559code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6560each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6561
6562This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6563specify it if you are using that target.
6564
c6dd86c6
JB
6565@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6566@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6567The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6568bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6569instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6570to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6571the support code can read the intended values.
6572
6573The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6574intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6575and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6576intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6577full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6578you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6579
6580If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6581enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6582@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6583mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6584vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6585@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6586
6587If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6588potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6589such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6590first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6591instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6592the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6593are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6594
2de70689
MGD
6595@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6596@kindex --fix-arm1176
6597@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6598The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6599in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6600are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6601unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6602
9d5777a3 6603Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6604Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6605http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6606
bf21ed78
MS
6607@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6608@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6609The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6610warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6611enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6612linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6613using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6614not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6615
6616@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6617@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6618The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6619warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6620@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6621linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6622using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6623
726150b7
NC
6624@cindex PIC_VENEER
6625@kindex --pic-veneer
6626The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6627ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6628is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6629@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6630
6631@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6632@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6633The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6634code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6635perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6636placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6637controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6638The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6639duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6640group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6641code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6642where they should be placed.
6643
6644The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6645@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6646placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6647branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6648placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6649value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6650exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6651A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6652linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6653from the input sections.
6654
6655The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6656@samp{N = +1}.
6657
1a51c1a4
NC
6658Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6659only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6660otherwise.
6661
1db37fe6
YG
6662@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6663@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6664@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6665The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6666
6667The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6668
68fcca92
JW
6669@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6670@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6671@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6672The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6673
6674Please contact ARM for further details.
6675
1db37fe6
YG
6676@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6677@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6678@cindex Merging exidx entries
6679The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6680
6681@kindex --long-plt
6682@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6683The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6684which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6685entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6686
36f63dca
NC
6687@ifclear GENERIC
6688@lowersections
6689@end ifclear
6690@end ifset
6691
6692@ifset HPPA
6693@ifclear GENERIC
6694@raisesections
6695@end ifclear
6696
6697@node HPPA ELF32
6698@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6699@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6700@kindex --multi-subspace
6701When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6702import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6703The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6704stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6705multiple sub-spaces.
6706
6707@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6708@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6709Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6710stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6711@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6712sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6713a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6714the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6715conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6716prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6717A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6718branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6719@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6720@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6721detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6722positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6723
6724Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6725single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6726create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6727large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6728
6729@ifclear GENERIC
6730@lowersections
6731@end ifclear
6732@end ifset
6733
7fb9f789
NC
6734@ifset M68K
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@raisesections
6737@end ifclear
6738
6739@node M68K
6740@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6741
6742@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6743@kindex --got=@var{type}
6744The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6745The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6746@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6747the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6748@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6749entries only at non-negative offsets.
6750@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6751entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6752support such GOTs.
6753@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6754output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6755file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6756files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6757
6758@ifclear GENERIC
6759@lowersections
6760@end ifclear
6761@end ifset
6762
833794fc
MR
6763@ifset MIPS
6764@ifclear GENERIC
6765@raisesections
6766@end ifclear
6767
6768@node MIPS
6769@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6770
6771@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6772@kindex --insn32
6773@kindex --no-insn32
6774The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6775microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6776in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6777used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6778or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6779including 16-bit ones where possible.
6780
6781@ifclear GENERIC
6782@lowersections
6783@end ifclear
6784@end ifset
6785
36f63dca
NC
6786@ifset MMIX
6787@ifclear GENERIC
6788@raisesections
6789@end ifclear
6790
6791@node MMIX
6792@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6793For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6794@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6795understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6796can translate between the two formats.
6797
6798There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6799Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6800registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6801equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6802@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6803global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6804this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6805symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6806
7a2de473
HPN
6807Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6808@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6809The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6810of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6811
6812Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6813are left out from an mmo file.
6814
6815@ifclear GENERIC
6816@lowersections
6817@end ifclear
6818@end ifset
6819
6820@ifset MSP430
6821@ifclear GENERIC
6822@raisesections
6823@end ifclear
6824
6825@node MSP430
6826@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6827For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6828will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6829just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6830
6831@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6832The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6833
6834@table @code
6835@item @samp{.vectors}
6836Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6837
6838@item @samp{.bootloader}
6839Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6840in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6841
6842@item @samp{.infomem}
6843Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6844this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6845
c0065db7 6846@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6847This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6848in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6849
6850@item @samp{.noinit}
6851Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6852
c0065db7 6853The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6854@end table
6855
6856@ifclear GENERIC
6857@lowersections
6858@end ifclear
6859@end ifset
6860
35c08157
KLC
6861@ifset NDS32
6862@ifclear GENERIC
6863@raisesections
6864@end ifclear
6865
6866@node NDS32
6867@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6868@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6869For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6870relaxes objects according to these options.
6871
6872@table @code
6873@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6874Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6875
6876@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6877Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6878
6879@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6880Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6881
6882@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6883Export the EX9 table after linking.
6884
6885@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6886Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6887
6888@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6889Update the existing EX9 table.
6890
6891@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6892Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6893
6894@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6895Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6896
6897@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6898Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6899
6900@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6901Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6902@end table
6903
6904@ifclear GENERIC
6905@lowersections
6906@end ifclear
6907@end ifset
6908
78058a5e
SL
6909@ifset NIOSII
6910@ifclear GENERIC
6911@raisesections
6912@end ifclear
6913
6914@node Nios II
6915@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6916@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6917@kindex --relax on Nios II
6918
6919Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6920transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6921which may result in @command{ld} giving
6922@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6923The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6924trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6925outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6926trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6927be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6928larger than 256MB.
6929
6930The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6931is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6932@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6933locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6934source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6935register as a temporary.
6936
6937Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6938relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6939option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6940
6941@ifclear GENERIC
6942@lowersections
6943@end ifclear
6944@end ifset
6945
2a60a7a8
AM
6946@ifset POWERPC
6947@ifclear GENERIC
6948@raisesections
6949@end ifclear
6950
6951@node PowerPC ELF32
6952@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6953@cindex PowerPC long branches
6954@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6955Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6956displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6957@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6958@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6959the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6960section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6961section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6962@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6963both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6964considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6965
6966@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6967@table @option
6968@cindex PowerPC PLT
6969@kindex --bss-plt
6970@item --bss-plt
6971Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6972generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6973the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6974writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6975@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6976PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6977compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6978BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6979
016687f8
AM
6980@kindex --secure-plt
6981@item --secure-plt
6982@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6983@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6984when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6985layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6986style BSS PLT.
6987
2a60a7a8
AM
6988@cindex PowerPC GOT
6989@kindex --sdata-got
6990@item --sdata-got
6991The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6992sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6993@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6994section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6995@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6996@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6997@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6998@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6999PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7000pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7001GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7002really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7003
7004@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7005@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7006@item --emit-stub-syms
7007This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7008symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7009
7010@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7011@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7012@item --no-tls-optimize
7013PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7014sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7015disable the optimization.
7016@end table
7017
7018@ifclear GENERIC
7019@lowersections
7020@end ifclear
7021@end ifset
7022
7023@ifset POWERPC64
7024@ifclear GENERIC
7025@raisesections
7026@end ifclear
7027
7028@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7029@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7030
7031@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7032@table @option
7033@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7034@kindex --stub-group-size
7035@item --stub-group-size
7036Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7037by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7038@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7039sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7040a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7041the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7042conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7043prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7044A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7045branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7046@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7047@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7048detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7049positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7050
7051Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7052single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7053create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7054large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7055
7056@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7057@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7058@item --emit-stub-syms
7059This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7060symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7061
7062@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7063@kindex --dotsyms
7064@kindex --no-dotsyms
7065@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7066These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7067in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7068function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7069code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7070properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7071to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7072@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7073dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7074feature.
7075
7076@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7077@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7078@item --no-tls-optimize
7079PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7080sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7081disable the optimization.
7082
7083@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7084@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7085@item --no-opd-optimize
7086PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7087corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7088the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7089Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7090
7091@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7092@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7093@item --non-overlapping-opd
7094Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7095@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7096the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7097entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7098
7099@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7100@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7101@item --no-toc-optimize
7102PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7103entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7104reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7105marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7106marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7107relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7108unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7109reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7110discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7111reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7112code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7113optimization.
7114
7115@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7116@kindex --no-multi-toc
7117@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7118If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7119@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7120where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7121entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7122total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7123grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7124TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7125calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7126help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
712764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7128Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7129
7130@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7131@kindex --no-toc-sort
7132@item --no-toc-sort
7133By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7134happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7135placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7136with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7137referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7138@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7139results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7140off this feature.
7141
7142@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7143@kindex --plt-align
7144@kindex --no-plt-align
7145@item --plt-align
7146@itemx --no-plt-align
7147Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7148padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7149specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7150that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7151stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7152
7153@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7154@kindex --plt-static-chain
7155@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7156@item --plt-static-chain
7157@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7158Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7159chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7160chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7161
7162@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7163@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7164@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7165@item --plt-thread-safe
7166@itemx --no-thread-safe
7167With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7168lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7169another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7170order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7171memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7172barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7173looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7174seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7175default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7176@end table
7177
7178@ifclear GENERIC
7179@lowersections
7180@end ifclear
7181@end ifset
7182
49fa1e15
AM
7183@ifset SPU
7184@ifclear GENERIC
7185@raisesections
7186@end ifclear
7187
7188@node SPU ELF
7189@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7190
7191@cindex SPU ELF options
7192@table @option
7193
7194@cindex SPU plugins
7195@kindex --plugin
7196@item --plugin
7197This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7198
7199@cindex SPU overlays
7200@kindex --no-overlays
7201@item --no-overlays
7202Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7203regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7204@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7205turns off all this special overlay handling.
7206
7207@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7208@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7209@item --emit-stub-syms
7210This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7211symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7212
7213@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7214@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7215@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7216This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7217function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7218on calls to non-overlay regions.
7219
7220@cindex SPU local store size
7221@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7222@item --local-store=lo:hi
7223@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7224the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7225range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7226
c0065db7 7227@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7228@kindex --stack-analysis
7229@item --stack-analysis
7230SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7231unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7232under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7233@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7234@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7235determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7236for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7237for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7238for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7239find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7240and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7241under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7242dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7243is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7244and calls will be given.
7245
c0065db7 7246@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7247@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7248@item --emit-stack-syms
7249This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7250in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7251These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7252functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7253functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7254such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7255The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7256@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7257@end table
7258
7259@ifclear GENERIC
7260@lowersections
7261@end ifclear
7262@end ifset
7263
36f63dca
NC
7264@ifset TICOFF
7265@ifclear GENERIC
7266@raisesections
7267@end ifclear
7268
7269@node TI COFF
7270@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7271@cindex TI COFF versions
7272@kindex --format=@var{version}
7273The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7274TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7275also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7276format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7277header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7278
7279@ifclear GENERIC
7280@lowersections
7281@end ifclear
7282@end ifset
7283
2ca22b03
NC
7284@ifset WIN32
7285@ifclear GENERIC
7286@raisesections
7287@end ifclear
7288
7289@node WIN32
7290@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7291
c0065db7 7292This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7293See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7294command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7295
7296@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7297@cindex import libraries
7298@item import libraries
69da35b5 7299The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7300libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7301regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7302archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7303support for creating such libraries provided with the
7304@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7305
c0065db7
RM
7306@item exporting DLL symbols
7307@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7308The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7309
7310@table @emph
7311@item using auto-export functionality
7312@cindex using auto-export functionality
7313By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7314which is controlled by the following command line options:
7315
0a5d968e
NC
7316@itemize
7317@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7318@item --exclude-symbols
7319@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7320@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7321@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7322@end itemize
7323
09e2aba4
DK
7324When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7325(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7326symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7327often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7328private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7329options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7330exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7331final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7332
7333If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7334command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7335if either of the following are true:
7336
7337@itemize
7338@item A DEF file is used.
7339@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7340@end itemize
dc8465bf 7341
c0065db7
RM
7342@item using a DEF file
7343@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7344Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7345an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7346exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7347name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7348command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7349
7350@example
7351gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7352@end example
7353
0a5d968e
NC
7354Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7355@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7356
dc8465bf
NC
7357Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7358
7359@example
4b5bd4e7 7360LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7361
7362EXPORTS
7363foo
7364bar
7365_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7366another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7367var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7368doo = foo == foo2
7369eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7370@end example
dc8465bf 7371
7fcab871 7372This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7373symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7374alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7375by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7376@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7377@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7378export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7379in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7380symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7381
6b31ad16
DS
7382The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7383name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7384the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7385
b45619c0
NC
7386When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7387library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7388@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7389executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7390
7391With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7392specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7393non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7394
7395If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7396or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7397filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7398
4b5bd4e7
DS
7399The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7400
7401@example
7402EXPORTS
7403 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7404 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7405 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7406@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7407
7408Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7409@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7410@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7411@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7412Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7413@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7414string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7415
7416The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7417
7418@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7419will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7420by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7421linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7422library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7423
7424@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7425The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7426the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7427@code{*_imp__foo}).
7428
7429@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7430well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7431read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7432variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7433the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7434extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7435application will behave unexpectedly.
7436
7437@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7438it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7439symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7440API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7441the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7442
4b5bd4e7
DS
7443See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7444other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7445
7446@cindex creating a DEF file
7447While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7448with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7449
7450@item Using decorations
7451@cindex Using decorations
7452Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7453itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7454declared as:
7455
7456@example
7457__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7458__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7459@end example
7460
7461All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7462any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7463this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7464the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7465
7466Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7467decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7468instead:
7469
7470@example
7471__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7472__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7473@end example
7474
c0065db7
RM
7475This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7476when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7477variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7478code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7479of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7480omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7481@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7482information.
c0065db7 7483@end table
dc8465bf 7484
2ca22b03
NC
7485@cindex automatic data imports
7486@item automatic data imports
7487The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7488by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7489compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7490issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7491code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7492c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7493initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7494decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7495platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7496command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7497The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7498suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7499trigger the feature's use.
7500
c0065db7 7501auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7502additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7503
c0065db7 7504"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7505documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7506
c0065db7
RM
7507The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7508occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7509One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7510below.
7511
7512@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7513For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7514object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7515offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7516field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7517in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7518without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7519The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7520references.
7521
c0065db7
RM
7522The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7523be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7524themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7525runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7526compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7527support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7528run without error on an older system.
7529
c0065db7
RM
7530@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7531enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7532
7533@cindex direct linking to a dll
7534@item direct linking to a dll
7535The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7536including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7537libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7538traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7539libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7540function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7541though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7542storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7543tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7544large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7545
c0065db7 7546Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7547@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7548of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7549perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7550select the dll instead of an import library.
7551
2ca22b03 7552
69da35b5
NC
7553For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7554to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7555
7556@example
45e948fe
NC
7557libxxx.dll.a
7558xxx.dll.a
7559libxxx.a
7560xxx.lib
69da35b5 7561cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7562libxxx.dll
7563xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7564@end example
7565
69da35b5
NC
7566before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7567
c0065db7
RM
7568(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7569where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7570@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7571file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7572@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7573
c0065db7
RM
7574Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7575@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7576was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7577various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7578could coexist on the same machine.
7579
2ca22b03
NC
7580The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7581applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7582libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7583
7584@example
7585bin/
7586 cygxxx.dll
7587lib/
7588 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7589 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7590@end example
7591
c0065db7
RM
7592Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7593done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7594
75951. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7596@example
7597gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7598@end example
2ca22b03 7599
69da35b5
NC
7600However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7601(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7602@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7603not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7604
2ca22b03
NC
76052. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7606directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7607should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7608making the app/dll.
7609
7610@example
7611ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7612@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7613
7614Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7615
7616@example
7617gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7618@end example
69da35b5
NC
7619
7620This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7621perfectly legal
7622
7623@example
7624bin/
7625 cygxxx-5.dll
7626lib/
c0065db7 7627 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7628@end example
7629
dc8465bf 7630Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7631even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7632@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7633
7634Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7635wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7636
76371. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7638work with auto-imported data.
7639
dc8465bf
NC
76402. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7641import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7642symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7643for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7644possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7645
45e948fe
NC
76463. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7647critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7648in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7649stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7650
69da35b5 7651So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7652true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7653a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7654binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7655massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7656requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7657will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7658
c0065db7 7659@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7660@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7661@item adding additional names
7662Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7663A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7664exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7665when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7666import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7667
c0065db7 7668@example
dc8465bf
NC
7669LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7670
7671EXPORTS
c0065db7 7672foo
dc8465bf 7673_foo = foo
c0065db7 7674@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7675
7676The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7677
7678Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7679source code using the "weak" attribute:
7680
c0065db7
RM
7681@example
7682void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7683void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7684@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7685
7686See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7687symbols.
7688
7689@item renaming symbols
7690Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7691kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7692@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7693DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7694created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7695
c0065db7 7696@example
dc8465bf
NC
7697LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7698
7699EXPORTS
7700_foo = foo
c0065db7 7701@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7702
7703The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7704@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7705@end table
dc8465bf 7706
0a5d968e 7707Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7708unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7709If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7710@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7711that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7712@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7713renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7714to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7715the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7716In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7717which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7718
7719@cindex weak externals
7720@item weak externals
7721The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7722weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7723defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7724are three variants of weak externals:
7725@itemize
7726@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7727called lazy externals.
7728@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7729This form is not presently implemented.
7730@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7731implemented.
7732@end itemize
7733As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7734are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7735uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7736
7737@cindex aligned common symbols
7738@item aligned common symbols
7739As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7740desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7741the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7742carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7743by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7744tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7745but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7746warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7747
2ca22b03
NC
7748@end table
7749
7750@ifclear GENERIC
7751@lowersections
7752@end ifclear
7753@end ifset
7754
e0001a05
NC
7755@ifset XTENSA
7756@ifclear GENERIC
7757@raisesections
7758@end ifclear
7759
7760@node Xtensa
7761@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7762
7763@cindex Xtensa processors
7764The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7765@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7766specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7767keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7768example, with the command:
7769
7770@smallexample
7771SECTIONS
7772@{
7773 .text : @{
7774 *(.literal .text)
7775 @}
7776@}
7777@end smallexample
7778
7779@noindent
7780@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7781and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7782literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7783interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7784group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7785files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7786and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7787
43cd72b9 7788@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7789@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7790Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7791provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7792is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7793literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7794will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7795location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7796the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7797unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7798@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7799range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7800
7801For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7802to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7803instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7804instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7805instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7806@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7807hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7808By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7809switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7810density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7811instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7812performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7813linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7814a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7815
7816The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7817control the linker:
7818
7819@cindex Xtensa options
7820@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7821@item --size-opt
7822When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7823more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7824no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7825alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7826preserve the correctness of the code.
7827@end table
e0001a05
NC
7828
7829@ifclear GENERIC
7830@lowersections
7831@end ifclear
7832@end ifset
7833
252b5132
RH
7834@ifclear SingleFormat
7835@node BFD
7836@chapter BFD
7837
7838@cindex back end
7839@cindex object file management
7840@cindex object formats available
7841@kindex objdump -i
7842The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7843These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7844object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7845format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7846it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7847associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7848object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7849(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7850list all the formats available for your configuration.
7851
7852@cindex BFD requirements
7853@cindex requirements for BFD
7854As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7855several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7856BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7857formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7858been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7859BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7860may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7861
7862One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7863mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7864useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7865conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7866
7867@menu
7868* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7869@end menu
7870
7871@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7872@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7873@cindex opening object files
7874@include bfdsumm.texi
7875@end ifclear
7876
7877@node Reporting Bugs
7878@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7879@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7880@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7881
ff5dcc92 7882Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7883
7884Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7885it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7886to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7887work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7888@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7889
7890In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7891information that enables us to fix the bug.
7892
7893@menu
7894* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7895* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7896@end menu
7897
7898@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7899@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7900@cindex bug criteria
7901
7902If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7903
7904@itemize @bullet
7905@cindex fatal signal
7906@cindex linker crash
7907@cindex crash of linker
7908@item
7909If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7910@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7911
7912@cindex error on valid input
7913@item
ff5dcc92 7914If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7915
7916@cindex invalid input
7917@item
ff5dcc92 7918If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7919may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7920object files are correct.
7921
7922@item
7923If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7924improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7925@end itemize
7926
7927@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7928@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7929@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7930@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7931
7932A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7933products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7934recommend you contact that organization first.
7935
7936You can find contact information for many support companies and
7937individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7938distribution.
7939
ad22bfe8 7940@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7941Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7942@value{BUGURL}.
7943@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7944
7945The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7946@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7947fact or leave it out, state it!
7948
7949Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7950problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7951assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7952matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7953the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7954location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7955were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7956into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7957specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7958and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7959
7960Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7961the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7962on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7963
7964Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7965bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7966respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7967You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7968
7969To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7970
7971@itemize @bullet
7972@item
ff5dcc92 7973The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7974the @samp{--version} argument.
7975
7976Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7977the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7978
7979@item
ff5dcc92 7980Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7981patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7982
7983@item
7984The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7985version number.
7986
7987@item
ff5dcc92 7988What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7989``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7990
7991@item
7992The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7993observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7994list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7995sufficient.
7996
7997If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7998and then we might not encounter the bug.
7999
8000@item
8001A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8002bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8003provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8004bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8005state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8006requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8007we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8008attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8009
8010If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8011@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8012object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8013@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8014how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8015
8016@item
8017A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8018incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8019
ff5dcc92 8020Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8021will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8022not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8023a chance to make a mistake.
8024
8025Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8026say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8027copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8028C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8029and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8030fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8031you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8032any conclusion from our observations.
8033
8034@item
ff5dcc92 8035If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8036diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8037@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8038If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8039context, not by line number.
8040
8041The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8042sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8043@end itemize
8044
8045Here are some things that are not necessary:
8046
8047@itemize @bullet
8048@item
8049A description of the envelope of the bug.
8050
8051Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8052which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8053changes will not affect it.
8054
8055This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8056will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8057with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8058We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8059
8060Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8061of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8062output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8063less time, and so on.
8064
8065However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8066report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8067
8068@item
8069A patch for the bug.
8070
8071A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8072the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8073a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8074to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8075
ff5dcc92 8076Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8077construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8078through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8079able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8080fixed.
8081
8082And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8083patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8084help us to understand.
8085
8086@item
8087A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8088
8089Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8090things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8091@end itemize
8092
8093@node MRI
8094@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8095@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8096To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8097linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8098alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8099described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8100simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8101@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8102linker commands; these commands are described here.
8103
8104In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8105file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8106features to make use of them.
8107
8108You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8109@samp{-c} command-line option.
8110
8111Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8112command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8113blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8114MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8115issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8116
8117Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8118
8119You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8120lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8121The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8122
8123@table @code
8124@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8125@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8126@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8127Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8128the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8129@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8130your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8131script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8132commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8133input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8134@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8135
8136@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8137@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8138Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8139in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8140
8141@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8142
8143@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8144@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8145Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8146@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8147
8148@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8149@item BASE @var{expression}
8150Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8151absolute addresses) in the output file.
8152
8153@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8154@item CHIP @var{expression}
8155@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8156This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8157
8158@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8159@item END
8160This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8161
8162@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8163@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8164Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8165language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8166
8167@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8168@item
252b5132
RH
8169S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8170
8171@item
8172IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8173
8174@item
8175COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8176@samp{COFF}
8177@end enumerate
8178
8179@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8180@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8181Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8182@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8183
8184The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8185same line, with no change in its effect.
8186
8187@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8188@item LOAD @var{filename}
8189@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8190Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8191same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8192command line.
8193
8194@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8195@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8196@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8197MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8198option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8199
8200@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8201@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8202@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8203Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8204order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8205script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8206sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8207file, in the order specified.
8208
8209@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8210@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8211@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8212@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8213Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8214@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8215
8216@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8217@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8218@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8219@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8220You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8221specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8222If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8223@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8224@end table
8225
793c5807
NC
8226@node GNU Free Documentation License
8227@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8228@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8229
370b66a1
CD
8230@node LD Index
8231@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8232
8233@printindex cp
8234
8235@tex
7ca01ed9 8236% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8237% meantime:
8238\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8239\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8240\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8241\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8242\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8243\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8244\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8245\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8246\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8247% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8248@end tex
8249
252b5132 8250@bye
This page took 1.171883 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.